Home

Dodge 2008 Ram Chassis Cab 3500 Automobile User Manual

1. 122 Rear PONS cesse piat 29 2 PX PEA Sates 127 Irem E eee dee ceases 123 Dediback Release ac oue ues amp dup eade edP xe 127 pino A Pn 122 Security Alarm Ihet Alarm 6 a sax som a emn 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 389 422 DelCCHON OF GIL gaa S asgus ea P Ped ane head 375 Pel Deanne TIES ua Sonn apes es een ENS 304 Sentry Key Immobilizer aetna ed o 9 s 15 Sentry Key Programming usos ARE e 16 Sentry Key Replacement 122 sms 16 DEEVIOG ASSISTANCE 46454 42 riire d PS 447 PENE CONAC coa oe 9 a p uc be Res 449 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator nm cssske ddNNggmum Service Manuals lt lt ie44442463 499 ex 45 Setting the Clock 4 4 ee d rdiet gis uc 196 197 201 210 Donne Pere 4254 2 daos 1 a ee een a oe Ga 191 DUIS C nee be eee ee E 256 Automatic Transmission 256 260 266 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 46 Shoulder Bellas s vum ee pees RISE T 4 SIorals IMI 233 eh 3 i Ow red 77 133 169 Slippery Surfaces Driving On uc uada pur cod vues 272 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 305 wies dii Pr 306 Sound System KiCKe gana ve eae ren Geos oleae poe ee eee 291 pate Mile syarie rine ES RESO VET 299 300 346 rudi 422 Specifications Fuel Gasoline eee ees 422 METTE 422 Speed Control Cruise Control 139 DpeedOmcler 442464045 b8 en 54seo 5 eu gst oe 167 TUNO 24 oe eee eee oO ae Bb
2. 28 Power DOON osse uz 8X LR EVE INE ENORS 29 Low Tire Pressure Systeni a a xmi aeger Ss 308 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren EG gt osa 14 5o PARLE e RIPE ETE EE 68 69 LuprpcaBon DOR 44444546545 deturnare 383 Lumbar iU DDEL 22999 9 19 91 35 4 9a 69 994 124 Maintenance Pree battery oe ss dise RR riti 378 Maintenance General leen 373 Maintenance Procedures nnna anaa aaa 373 Maintenance Schedule 426 Maintenance Sunroof 00 00008 152 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 178 371 Manual Service 2o 23 boot tad wR RETR UE ES OH 45 Map Reading Lights 2222 RRRTSS 134 143 Master Cylinder Brakes aue aadeo diuccuxueu e ata 394 Methanol 2 225243 099 39 x ano W amas 319 Mini ip Computer creses vq eR Peer hne 184 MITOS 2 42 74 6 wha OB mE hm eee ek ee NE E Ed 83 S wire ieerci sto DTIP s sea aa Rees es M ES 84 Electric Powered sse Rs S eG aoe Y 86 Electric Remote ele 86 EXISnoE Folding s iav e oases 5 EXP OE IE V dee 85 ale i e 2 232953 993 568 26 bas Ge E 86 Outside izerrecerereiiiiad i teo TENERE 84 Rearview 6 2425 4ce826642de Hebe eS os 83 ees NNNM Esse YODIDU eresi du CERES RS CAR EU RE ES 86 Mode Fuleloaver suc rema mRNA dS ees 184 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System sao dace ca wis 308 Mopar Patis 4 442449 44y4 pg ei Sod Res se 372 450 NMIBE EIBE lt 2 ic ose 6o8
3. 05 276 O Power Steering Fluid Check sua cx v 276 ll Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only 277 B Parking Brake PP 277 Bl Anti Lock Brake System 280 W Electronic Brake Control System 282 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 282 B Traction Control System TCS 282 U Brake Assist System BAS 4 us sous 283 H Electronic Stability Program ESP 283 SyNCMOMIZiINe ESP sos daey es hes rene lt 5 285 o ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And ESP ICS Indicator Light s es edm ae ns 286 Mi Tire Safety Information 287 ite mr rior 2204 204 ass oa oh es cone 25 287 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 O Tire Identification Number TIN 290 H Replacement lires uw su55e5n444 io 303 o Tire Terminology And Definitions 291 Mi oelt Sealing Tires If Equipped 304 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 292 W Er C DH usos a ey uc d e HER tenes tesa 305 W Tires General Information 206 W Snow Tires 23 4 4x4 4d ERROR eases 306 E Due DIOSSUIE 52445455560 Peas 6 dde x 296 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 307 O Tire Inflation Pressures 297 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 308 o Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 298 O Base System ARadial Piy Wes usos uode Y nar se dod Peu seh d 299 O Premium System If Equipped
4. 76 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 77 Safety Defects Reporting 450 Safety Exhaust GaS exis 9g e esee de 682 Rei 03 oe 75 Safety Information Tire 12229266 RET RES 287 ay HDS rrr 74 D EEEEENLLSIIIIIIIIGIIIIIIIULULLLILILLLISIILILIIIILI ILLIIAI L L A AoOGUOALLLLLALGIUAL IALLLLXGLEGGIUU difAl NA UULkGCCA C OL AuLAUABX LX1LLAL ALAAGIGGAG IXGHLCGA AL laaoA UL OcGSCSDGAA GCSTXA A LL LP 2 CORP 74 Satellite Radio Antenna sns 228 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 227 Schedule Maintenance eee 426 Seat Belt Maintenance len 402 Seat Belt Reminder 48 Seat Belts 2 0 0 0 0 0 ce eee ee ee 3941 76 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 46 Abd Pregnant WOMEN esee RR RR 49 Child Restraint 2 x22 wcte 3er here 64 65 66 71 SAE M RERRETESTTRSSTOSTTTTTTRTTTTTT 49 Front Seat oes none bee a ee E EUR Res 41 42 MISPCCUON sss cc ve GHRe Seeds EE BUR 76 Operating Instructions usse os cus RC ssas 42 Pretensioners js 0 44444 533064 3 940 d 9 o DAL 47 Rear Seat lees 41 Reminder ses vdd S XGA RAUS S WE EE S 171 Untwisting Procedure 22 39e 4 0405 oe oo 94 46 ee C CRT a a E a a ee ae er 120 Head Restraints 2 0000 00000 124 niri 6 oha555o 264 bo eu eee eee Geo oe 126 RICICGLACIUGENCUL 2c a up aur eee be eases 122 Lumbar DU DEL pie dwes 4 ieie cece ene es 124 OWN
5. 16 25 115 517 General Maintenance 0008 373 Glass CIGANINE ssa 2h rays m 402 Gross Axle Weight Rating 326 329 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 326 328 GVWR ghee ee tad 4 he eee eek eas Hees 326 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 87 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Sm CSSCSC CSCSCs i s Hazard Warning Flasher 4222 29 eg 44 es 344 ead Restraints ones 999 3 9 9 9 COR OUR BRE 124 Headlight Washers oss cues dar dp edP EUER Sag 8 384 In relireisi CC M 415 AMOMO aes gore ddp RE Sache de bue q Sa 130 Dulb Replacenietil o 4h402044 4 40008 iriri 412 o DA aed eee oo os ee ee eee ee a oan 401 RES 191 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 199 Lights On Reminder 2s 68 2446 pon nog aes 132 Cn With Wipers s oq tons soa a ay d 131 138 lc ccn 134 vi unir P a 130 Time Delay page es ee ng beeen eee ee 131 Lr aadi e e a E a E RA S 74 384 Heated MINOS 25 s es ea kemi saia iaa Ses a i 86 Heated Seals agresie pyr EEE a E os 126 OIE 23 29939 PERI aes ome ea PT PES 237 Heater Engine BIOCK 2595229 931408 eor 9 92 5 256 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 133 Hitches Trane VOWS xs pcxuuess Qedre Dare due a 330 Holder COM os eoru bene het EU A nu ob RA 157 LOIRE CU arepane ors a Sua oa ees 156 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 143 Hood Release iac iaceo Xam REESE X wd 128 ISTUD 3 iw we
6. 915 D Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 299 EL General Information sesse usum rs 917 D Limited Use Spare If Equipped 300 W Fuel Requirements 318 ie Spine 4 46042 6e beter es baad 301 BAJEN 4 6 teats ban PA RUE AA ES 318 El Treac Wear Mdicators esa see cce reta 302 ESL ABUS NING 3v ee zaer tase Hee ed 318 BELL Of TH usce 2 mpi mE SEES 302 O Reformulated Gasoline 319 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ee B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends O E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles o MMT In Gasoline o Materials Added To Fuel Lus 921 O Fuel System Cautions 245659 pee kos 321 H Carbon Monoxide Warnings 322 W Adding Fuel uoa ceca dread qe RR SA RS 928 A Poel Miller Cp Gas Gap eesioer new ees 323 H Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 025 Mi Vehicle Loading 326 D Vehicle Certification Label 326 D Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 326 XO Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 326 miO E O 2324445 z RI EIS EI RS TE RSS SY sibilo UPC 327 920 W Trailer Towing oue eere Romeo 328 O Common Towing Definitions 328 EL Trailer Hitch Classification ns 330 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Kannas ws screk esas oc bs E RSS 332 E Trailer And Tongue Weight sss rens oan os 333 O Towing Requirements 22 ce d aee edes 334 TOWNS DDR axe dd ru ded yi bees dedos 2 3 d 339 ll Recreational Towing
7. All Wheel Drive AWD Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule l Rotate tires LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter Gf equipped J Replace the spark plugs 2 7L and Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 3 5L Engines Inspect the CV joints _I Replace the timing belt 3 5L Engine Inspect exhaust system L1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for not done at 60 months damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8
8. e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position roll E down the window and open the door with the outside 5 5 door handle rjr tak idrlew Child Lock Control 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position um a wate m WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows Ee Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE WARNING e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening children can become entrapped by the windows either front door will cancel this feature while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death e For vehicles equipped with the EVI
9. 9 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is on 5 lachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 6 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices i e radio or slightly increase engine speed if at idle If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check Je when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec tronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ign
10. Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Pla
11. NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM Operating Instructions Radio Mode STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX l JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side tetadio faceriate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio ru Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played TUNE SCROLL O 042305233 RES RSC Radio 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the
12. Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster peat stroke indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency Some of the most important safety features in your release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid vehicle are the restraint systems near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance Trunk Emergency Release occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH N
13. To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes sage states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming
14. gt 030907585 Adjustable Head Restraint Removing Head Restraint To remove the head restraint pull upward on the head To install the head restraint insert the head restraint rods restraint to its highest position push in both buttons at into each guide apply pressure down on the headrest the base of each head restraint rod and simultaneously until the head restraint reaches the first lock position pull up on the head restraint push the large button in and push down and adjust head restraint to desired position 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Ensure that the front of the head restraint is facing toward the front of the vehicle WARNINCG Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The controls for each front seat are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off Press the switch once
15. Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inf
16. All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
17. Behind Motorhome Etc 341 3 Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive 341 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat before shifting into any driving gear belts CAUTION WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Normal Start
18. Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect Phone 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Iowing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Iowing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems W
19. LODGE 200 J J Charger OWNER S MANUAL o m O c O e esI e o e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80 4C soe eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION M oo LLL LLILIIILIULLLILIILIIILIIIILLLIUILLL AeLILLL OLLL LSILUO U00 ULoILU IA 0g GGUGD uIeco OCOB UucdLILLLLLILALLAALOAPIBDUOoeBGB L LG4LTGDCE E EAOLULULIGw INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you
20. Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vn button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel 1 ds ea d ae dH e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l Radio M t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu s 44 p e h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Radio Menu t itch to the radi A Mc ne fo O T tOaner To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mod
21. Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 295 296 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire over heating and failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflati
22. This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob removed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security alarm Opening a door with the security alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm To Unlatch the Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk Using the Panic Alarm To turn the
23. Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation If Equipped NOTE Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare 1 Mount the road tire on the axle For vehicles equipped with wheel covers perform Steps 2 and 3 For vehicles equipped with center caps proceed to Step 4 2 Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to 5 L valve Notch the ground 3 Wheel Lug Nut Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover 5 Mounting Stud 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increas
24. ment e Adiagonal 7 in 17 8 cm Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen integrated into the center console armrest The screen features brightness control for optimum day time and nighttime viewing ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 ELETIEEIUETITE 8199815e 8199818b Opening the Rear Seat VES VES Video Screen e The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest NOTE Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display raised to its viewing position e The radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See e A battery powered infrared remote control snaps into a molded compartment in the center console armrest upper storage bin 81abfb61 VES Remote Control e Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player 1 Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to the Uconnect Multimedia section of Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details REMOTE SOUND SY
25. ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 449 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 7
26. 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DET
27. Compass Calibration 4 amp 2 54 ow gore esa RR 189 Compass VODIdDGE 2c b an ann ea pate nes ntti 190 Computer drip Travel scs uoi aos de rese CHR 184 Connector Diels sch wan DV RUE ROUES UR EROR DL 221 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 221 Conce FC uucssdeeao A dene ACA OR SCR S A 184 Console Floor eee 157 Console Overhead eee 142 Contract Service eee 449 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 991 COOMNG OUSIEHE aue rs d933 0434 ee bases eee ees 388 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 390 coolant Capacity i250 2993x450 9449 993 420 Coolant Level 45 a 3 x dr eR Ra 388 392 Disposal of Used Coolant 391 Drain Flush and Refill 42 22x22 389 IMSPeCCHOM uc e exec ae beh eee eee e bee A 292 Points to KemembDer uus adoro agia Rd Acepta 297 Pesme Cap 25445 4445 Ron E dui d wee d eot d on Radiar Cap serrer isi 3 Rd Brei gears 391 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 389 420 422 COnmosion E TOISEHDDE uates sy acy s erga riesen 398 Cruise Control Speed Control sse aces 139 eL rrr 167 CUPNOIGCIS 224 65 4 orbs FICA ba ROS 156 402 Customer ASSISKNCE seriy cena eg Ee pen ow 447 Customer Programmable Features 191 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 135 Daytime Running Lights 24322 v a3 ra RE Dealer Service 2502 Sd ge Saca E UE Td ep S T oes Deck Lid Emergency Release eel CALIUAHGUFAAOIoeGAU
28. Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position 2 8 STARTING AND OPERATINC M The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a seco
29. If Equipped D Outside Mirrors D Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped D Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped O Power Mirrors o Heated Mirrors If Equipped o Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 86 ll Uconnect phone If Equipped 87 EMOPeErduOn sco x9 aye ce dS ab ae 89 Phone Call Features usb qol P Re eh des 97 D Uconnect phone Features 100 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 105 H Things You Should Know About Your Uconnecf M PRONG a sas dct bep edd x Bod de 107 O General Information 435 v Exe 115 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie ll Voice Command If Equipped Ho Me wieiaueceeekicbeeq54 0 9 953 130 O Voice Command System Operation 115 AHeadi nr SWIC us gh eda ade Oo e Ae ee ei 130 EORR uoces esos eon aep s cedi do hh uses 117 D Automatic Headlights If Equipped 130 ELVOISG TANNE 3 4 5 2992209 3 3933 Sun yen oS 120 o Headlights On With Wipers Available With Meals 22299599093 OG eee ee ees S RES E 120 Automatic Headlights Only 131 O Manual Seats If Equipped 121 O Headlight Time Delay 4 52645 e oes 131 O Power Seats If Equipped 122 D Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 132 3 Power Reclining Seats If Equipped 123 O Lights On Reminder seess See de epar 45 132 o Lumbar Support If Equipped 124 D Fo
30. Line 3 we REY ACTIVATE Guat ig Hr wing POWER OUTLET L ar C HOOD RELEARE LOVER AIH REC CULATION TITLED L 3 C M GUAT AND VONHTILATIO FAN LOWER iiit OLET a v 4 TUNG Doo TRUM DECE au ESN Te MES muarAsE N oO 4 SLiDMG DOOR EMERGENCY RELEASE HANDLE o mm m h DOCA MIAS CONVERTISLE TOP Down LiGHTEIN COW WER THLE TOR ue a of OOF LOCK Bae Vrae eT TE PRESSURE MOuwiToa 3 T n CONYEHTISLE TRACTION A WERDEN DOVIN Ens rmm KLECTPON C WHT DUE THROTTLE CONTROL Ji ee TERIER Acca ME AND TETHER F ECT CHRLOREN TATEM BUTTON SEE OVERS MA MAR a Lay INTRODUCTION 5 ESP ELECThONIC STABILITY ELECTKOMK PROGFAM DRAKE SPEED CONTROL wg Svi 2 9 SYETEM LLGESCCHT Ams Pino CONTHOR AWD A ALL HERL FAILUHE OF AM eH DRIVE EHLARMM ETSILW 4WD BRAKE FOUR WHEEL WARMING PARKING MANE BRAKE TOW HAUL Vea prep TE e BL 4 LOW HAZARD Fola WHEL ORRE LOW A c PUSH OFF mt UBTABILITY Tey DNYHOL OFF 010507683 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left fro
31. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake
32. antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warming words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a q
33. mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer ECO Lula eed bo 4b on RS S dE Fuel Saver Indicator 2drivE Vehicle is in Rear Wheel Drive RWD AdrivE Vehicle is in All Wheel Drive AWD ICASE PE AWD System Fault gASCAP Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message LO WIE 038 2 04 deer ue E eas Low Tire Pressure NOPUSE 4 4 2424 04 25244564 E EDS Fuse Fault Oil Change Required ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus ter this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropria
34. section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistanc
35. the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system Operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an a
36. 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security alarm Opening a door with the security alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
37. A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning
38. CAUTION park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal remote positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper c
39. Continued Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage 2 GTW 3 GAWR Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for informa tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor Towing Requirements Tires mation in Starting and Operating for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and GAWR limits and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes CAUTION D t int t the h li oe eee ee jeu puse eo If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer loaded it should have
40. E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer 150 Months Maintenance Service to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions Schedule warranty L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires WARNING L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter L1 Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engines L1 Inspect the transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive AWD L1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas eee eee ee
41. Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 456 INDEX M About Your Brakes 4 4445544635024 8545644 277 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 280 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 390 POCO UC 20 uos Ree ax Boe eee SUP eee ae eX 229 Adding Washer Fluid 2 44 2 ed acere a ois 384 Addi ves Puel fen ead dogma OMS E dO RC os 921 Adjustable Pedals us suceda eps aed uu de ous 138 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 378 Air Conditioner Maintenance 380 PE COMGINODING uu sd paa aporte Sod A 237 240 Air Conditioning COnuOls 4023004006 283 us 257 Air Conditioning Filter 246 381 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 247 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 380 381 Air Conditioning System 237 240 380 Air Pressure Tires 2 4254 8466 444 koe RD 297 ANDIZ PC 50 58 mu rbac Deplo VIED e ase noe
42. Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 7L and 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on
43. MAALILGAULLS oOGUUt OGJ Mmu0 ip DL1 o d uw iisii SuAAoGSGI A1oaAAAAB Bk G76C Deck Lid Power Release Defroster Rear Window 159 Defroster Windshield 77 239 244 Delay Intermittent Wipers 136 Diagnostic System Onboard i secs os ag bs 370 Dimmer Switch Headlight 133 Dipsticks CILCEHOIB 646444040 one bos Ceres ae ae 374 Power Ae ONNO ough caedsou ese uv noe Te 276 Disabled Vehicle TOWING 0 06 20 c00o0 8444944 362 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 391 Ko D O EE 377 Doo DoC Dm 28 Door Locks Automatic eren 29 Door Opener Garage eke bot ddr i eet kee es 143 Driving On Slippery DU QCOS 25 24 3 RAREI RES 272 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water DVD Player Video Entertainment System Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Electronic Stability Program Traction Control System Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Emergency Deck Lid Release p 292 159 86 153 282 282 283 283 282 403 159 283 168 180 E INDEX 461 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 224 444 dome d 3
44. Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And IPS Adio Play 22024 c m drops o Notes On Playing MP3 Files 45s ede O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play G Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped D Connecting The iPod D Using This Feature D Controlling The iPod Using Radio buttons ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 o Play Mode O List Or Browse Mode Bl Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN RER RES Radios Only D System Activation o Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode O Satellite Antenna D Reception Quality O Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode D Operating Instructions Uconnect phone If Equipped W Kicker High Performance Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS IP PQUIDDeG xd sea ec ndracpcs e d hee tae ded 25 ll Video Entertainment System VES I QUID PCG 4 c vizi LE qu EE de EN ES 252 ll Remote Sound System Controls B CD DVD Disc Maintenance ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 297 W Climate Controls ossis dere erre ER sa 237 3 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating so fc D 90893 829 8 uer ae E 237 O Automatic Temperature Control KEU OL scusa eor dct ob ES dn cheese 240 ECOperduns Se 4 95552 bare 3 eee ges 245 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTR
45. OPERATING 335 WARNING WARNING Continued Improper towing can lead to an injury accident e Safety chains must always be used between your Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Load ing Information placard Continued 336 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee WARNING
46. Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing 2 Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down the retaining clips and remove the used filter UE ng 072610692 Access Door 3 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this A C Air Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood serv
47. PARK only after the vehicle has come to the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that a complete stop is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the Module vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Remember to disconnect the cord before driving into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon e Altitude e Vehicle loading e Driving style e Shift lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait
48. Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the RKE transmitter Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 021305151 Battery Replacement 1 Battery Access Door 2 Remove and replace the batte
49. Spale TIG eke 1 ade pie Sede 354 o Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation If EQUIDDEO x dcdoiees aos acm ed des iba dr ici e 4 355 B Jump Starting Procedures 97 O Preparations For Jump Start D Jump Starting Procedure W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle W Towing A Disabled Vehicle D Without The Ignition Key D Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicdle nne o Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Wih A low Dolly s cs 03432554 eee eens 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the
50. a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle 2 4 STARTING AND OPERATING See Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits yo
51. a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position before re starting Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position first 258 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in the DRIVE or REVERSE position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key fo
52. and the indicator light will turn off set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd 4th or 5th gear when in the Autostick mode if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 e The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal e Press the brake pedal e Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL Pushing and releasing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you c
53. and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S
54. be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion FC TIERE Se Paton eee e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say language is deleted Phonebook Delete e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will deleted or edited then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Press the button to begin Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing th
55. beam Indicator ess ess oe Ge ede een 171 High Beam Low Beam Select Ilearunaled Eny os 5 06 eod 4 0 eder oe IRE 18 466 INDEX M Instrument Cluster sn 130 167 Intensity CONWOL 25424444 ed PI ER RSE WARS 135 EO S42 wees dod s 6 o S EP E E eR 134 143 LICENSE CC 419 Lenis On Reminder 43 23 9v 2 udrs ced d antea 192 Loss Fuel 4 seus E Ge do RR ERE eee Res 178 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 178 Map Redding 23s 4k tie hg ERE 134 143 Oil Presse cer eevee sacdeaces XE EP ES 171 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 195 Cc AP rr DT 134 KOOD aout A Gores ge FCR ERRARE CN 134 143 Seat Belt Reminder 171 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 176 Service eee s 411 412 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 178 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 176 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 176 308 Traction Control 26 44 eee4geeen ee ORE 286 A INDEX 47 Tunt Signal 33393 dh PE PIE E ee ase 77 132 133 169 Mai MITO audes pend eo Hee RES ep AGS 86 D rrr 168 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 167 Load Leveling System sins a deba daa 9 ages 160 Loading Veluel amp sosecestietcinsgaenesas 326 327 e ucc a das ani E Eg ee eh ETETETT 327 o sershira sawn set ee aaa 292 LOCKS T 28 Auta UNOC s secede tm ep cR a Ban EE 30 Automa ne DOOF x our us dcr doe P mie Spurs 29 Cod Trotechon 2o sua PRA EXE hee S SE ERE 31 po
56. can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivea
57. cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an in
58. cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt
59. could result The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting Center Console Power Outlet WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not touch with wet hands e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Continued vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessor
60. create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or unlock any door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition buttons for all RKE transmitters switch is turned ON from the LOCK position NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading li
61. e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Uconnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped e Navigation system screens if equipped 041005513 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Audio mode display e Surround Sound modes if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status and Personal Settings Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to gt accept a selection The FUNCTION SE LECT button also functions as a remote FUNCTION Sound system control Refer to Remote SELECT Sound System Controls Button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings SCROLL Customer Programmable Features The Button SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system control Refer to Remote Sound System Controls J AUDIO MODE Button A Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen Along with compass reading and outside temperature this screen will display radio and media mode information
62. engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient servi
63. for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary To maximize fuel economy your AWD vehicle automati cally defaults to rear wheel drive RWD when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction the 2 2 STARTING AND OPERATINC xe vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera ture wheel slip or other predetermined conditions there may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs AWD can also be manually se lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick mode or activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of time Drive mode RWD or AWD is displayed momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the gage area of the vehicle display when the transmission is first shifted into gear and if the drive mode changes during vehicle operation NOTE If the t CASE or SERVICE AWD SYSTEM warning message appears after engine start up or during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION
64. free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Do not allow s
65. from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illuminate the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro cess If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can
66. if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Ad ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immediately afte
67. in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for u
68. indicator will turn off NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begin to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air 5ome temp humidity conditions will cause captured inte rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost Floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of blower preferred automatic mode preferred automatic or blower and mode preferred automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the blower control knob on the left NOTE Please read the automatic temperature control operation chart that follows for details ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation How Blower Control Mode Con
69. job take your vehicle to a competent me result in more costly repairs damage to other chanic components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 2 7L and 3 5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Ove
70. lb Replacement oce 3 vus yee E yg 9 eme mee d 411 412 DUDS E38 P sace sore dona ae oe A ae ER Urn 77A11 Calibration Compass 23 doa rra do gerer Re 189 Capacriec FIG eee seu pues Rob oe SR RC HR 3 420 Caps Filler lu Mp 323 CIE CERO S cea REOR hoa hee IRE 376 Power GEOD cs ka 6533 6425854 e REGIOS 276 Radiator Coolant Pressure 391 Car Washes uae sopREOE PE eee Eder f Sot nd ee 398 Carbon Monoxide Warning 75 922 Cargo Vehicle Loading 644 dur 44654 cb es 326 Cellular PHONG 4dcececncer ese we ee eee ae 87 237 Certification Label 0 00000 ue 326 Chains Wie 222 390 23 3802 3 X ERES 305 Changing A Flat TIE oy cheno su ehh Sor e Se 9r 3 345 Cave qu INS oe ard osea quc oe ances ea it 288 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 371 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 74 NECKS Daley PC 74 Child Restraint oo oko SOR E Y She ae 64 66 69 71 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 68 69 Cmd Gately LOCKS esse var eos ted S3 UP Eds 3l Clean Air Gasoline 4225252929 650 0 ma 319 Cleaning lg 5 otk Gewese rrr 400 Windshield Wiper Blades 384 Climate Control eREMRERODEORISSURETA dO ES 237 en INDEX 459 doy 3 545455 4546 2558 eRe eee as 196 197 201 210 COMmiHOlde 25 gosse goted d 5 9c eno nds En bees 157 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 236 Compact spare Tite iess soe om een ene a ears 299 Sanc cM PDC 189
71. move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Seat Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Power Reclining Seats If Equipped WARNING The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the seat Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest Use the recline control to adjust the forward or rearward position of the seatback In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Power Seat Recline Switch 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lumbar Support If Equipped Head Restraints This feature allows you to increase or decrease the Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for ofarear impact The head restraint should be adjusted so ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired the top of the head restraint is located above the top of amount of lumbar support your ear To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the large button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Lumbar Support Control Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
72. oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake Required Maintenance Intervals master cylinder and power steering add as needed Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Dar OPE ce eee ee operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429 6 000 Miles 10 0
73. one of the faceplate following reasons Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display structure or under a physical obstacle Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A form of short audio mutes CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN b
74. option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If
75. other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle SELF SEALING TIRES IF EQUIPPED Never use a tire with a smaller load index or A non hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner capacity other than what Was originally equipped liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0 19 in 5 mm to on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load minimize the loss of air pressure This contributes to the index could result in tire overloading and failure safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob You could lose control and have an accident ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 a r Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet CAUTION Continued SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the Because of restricted chain clearance between tires proper size for the vehicle as recommend
76. playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of fo
77. proceed by saying one of the following commands e Language Spanish e Language French Repeat to repeat a memo e Tutorial Next to play the next memo e Voice Training 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command SVR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be serious
78. read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual i ie WATER IM FUEL REAR VINCI EXTERSOR DULA WHER ZUTE yY i 0 1 j I PEES o N is FLLEE LEVEL D v y 2005 WINDEHELD ENGKE DL HEAR TX p x4 PAR LIGHTS BATTERY HEATED HRIH Sa CHAS MOS S QuCW Pil FOMWER FEDRO FLUID i o E SRS Lr T RIRERU amemus BALI TION TRANS Bike COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL DoS ATORLLHIHT lL TEM TEMPERATLRS RHESTRAINT SYSTEM pl O O 0 FRONT FOG LIGHT Qt BEAR I LAMP s SEAT BELT WM t aes LIFTGATE FELEABE AHD cif TQATE DFEN e y TORN SIGNALS HEATED SEAT
79. result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is considered a normal condition Pulling the shift lever into the 3 position will show that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This is considered a normal condition and it will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into second gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate This reset feature allows the vehicle to be
80. section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the eo button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please s
81. snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS i and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT oet the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle A set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Sx Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level pilo with A C on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and so 4 64 Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 6 646 pil COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor A If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS i In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 27 In very cold weather if you need extra heat a
82. that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is n
83. the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode Placing items on the iPod or connections to the e LIST button The LIST button will display the top iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob device and or to the connectors to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next WARNING o sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow SESS ISTE the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this Failure to follow this warning could result in an system accident e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may
84. the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation
85. the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the EP NJ heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Folding Rear Seats 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When the seatback is folded to the upright position make TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the Two latches must be released to open the hood seatback above the seat strap 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side WARNING of the instrument panel e Becertain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Hood Release Lever ps ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the SpA center front edge of the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately
86. the rear window defroster is on The rear window Continued 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features 164 Mi Instrument Cluster
87. the wheel is still on the ground ss Lug Nut Removal Installation 1 Tighten 2 Loosen 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 060503830 Jack Engagement Locations en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 353 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire WARNINCG Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand Do not pry it off 7 Mount the spare tire NOTE For vehicles equipped with a center cap or wheel cover do not attempt to install it on the compact spare However when reinstalling the road tire follow the procedure under Wheel Cover or Center Cap Instal lation in place of the remaining steps in this procedure 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft lb 135 N
88. time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 CAUTION Cooling System Drain Flu
89. to protect you WARNING WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you in another collision Have the airbags protect you Do not modify the components or seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat wiring including adding any kind of badges or belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant upper right side of the instrument panel Do not Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie ASIA Aoo You will want to have the airbags ready to e Do not attempt to modify any part of Jons ad 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While vanced airbag system The airbag az d inflate the airbag system is designed to be mainte accidentally or may not function properly if modi nance free if any of the following occurs have fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho an authorized dealer service the system immediately rized
90. to select High level heat 4y ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off If High level heating is selected the system will auto matically switch to the Low level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the Low level setting also turns off automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING Folding Rear Seat If Equipped On some models the rear seatbacks can be folded e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when tion or other physical condition must exercise care not in use when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long peri ods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to
91. when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se when exiting the vehicle To make your selection pres
92. when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable Battery Location clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Continued 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should
93. when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 15 High Beam Indicator This indicator will turn on when the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee 17 Shift Lever Indicator Automatic Transmission Only The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 19 Odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip
94. wo 919 Exhaust Gas Caution 75 322 385 Exhaust Oye recesie poo end eae wees 75 385 462 INDEX M ExIGUOE Poking MUTO xs 15x sT9 es IA ERR 85 EXIenor Dio UD ius odi hee ddos pihi himi 130 EXICHODL MICS 3a sare cede raya tears qos Ead 77 Filler Location Fuel 24222 ee eek ha eee RRs be 323 Filters Air Cleaner 2 2 55 93323 du xs Oe oes SG 378 Adr CONCINOMING ics eoe Sore ede e titina 246 381 Ene OU gee deeetuese iuesdeaoss 377 422 Engine OIL Disposal 35a ah tetto Poir 277 Flashers Hazard Warning was 2 cede RA tees E io 344 TUS Al goon eee eee d sre eee oo 77 133 169 Flash To Pass ido ddedeceecdseds 134 Fiat Dre C DafigiBB s e39 x4 m a eec ded drap R ea ss 345 Flooded Engine Starting lt vicc4s4aee45050 5 254 Floor Console 23 99 64 bose Se Se EE ARE EARS 157 Fluid Brake 22 32 ebS4 6h 645054 424 Puid CapaGues o4cne eras Mae eu da eee ded 420 Fluid Leaks 45446 bee bb oe 9599 RT SPET 77 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 995 li PC 394 COON OVSE uar 994 299 ace xS A sta 388 POMO MP 374 POWer SICCHNG seed ep Pa eos Pare anne ea es 276 Transfer Case 244 4666 28 444 REPRE RR RE 397 PIGS 222 9 92x edems eet oe eee E 422 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 422 POs CENG 5s c 99 Pres PIT thes e S p 192 172 Folding Rear ed aa 232 61V puncta CE EROR PUE RAS 127 Preeme A Stuck Vehicle ses cea edo a e em we D4 361 PU 2 oe be eee pee Behe ee Be
95. you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle y NN The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be allow the belt to retract fully at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
96. your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand y 4 020207467 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the Key Fob 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE WARNING e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving switches radio power sunroof if equipped and unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after number of reasons A child or others could be seri the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position ously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in Opening either front door will cancel this feature the ignition A child could operate power windows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power other controls or move the vehicle window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understa
97. 00 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditi
98. 11 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer 450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be please
99. 2 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc t
100. 3 Wheel and Wheel Trim less 400 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 400 Wind DOLMCHNS ers tud doR S abe xa bd es 97 152 Widow FOGGING ci cs ett hoe eder tend 246 VIIRUOWS 2c aae Scb oo we Exe Yeteri eae Ses 34 OWED Ls daa dodo SS dd du opti Suo 34 Windshield Defroster 77 239 244 Windshield Washers 136 137 Pr 384 Windshield Wiper Blades 384 Windshield VIDES sa sts dac Porn deir a ex a Ioh a 136 Wiper Blade Replacement 384 Wiper Deli an cS vede d REIS ARGIS 136 Wipers Intermittent amp 5432 x exRERETQS 40 136 CHRYSLER SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10D481 126 AB 2nd Edition Printed in U S A
101. 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031305159 Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS Headlight Switch XD The headlight switch is located on the left side of ws the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte rior lights and fog lights Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
102. 61 Hazard Warmine Flasher a s gubsen arse sese 344 JACI eae ot 4h eee eben eee ae ad ae eos 345 JUIN SATIN sous aiis s med ee ated us 4 vis 357 OVEINCHUNG LS os aceract itd doped ppt ee ays lt 344 TON Spee A Y enntre RISE PS bee es m E 362 Emergency Trunk Release x asses nett Re 39 Emission Control System Maintenance 371 426 Iran PEE 367 368 369 PUE leaner ga oa dae doa ee UE WES 378 doudou MMC 256 Break In Recommendations 74 Checking Oil Level uua 23 149 59 2 3 3 3 309 374 COmpartmelit eeke aes ip a6 hes be 367 368 369 Coolant Antifreeze 388 422 COONS 20904 PS PE 55824 oes S S ee EN 388 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 T3022 Fails to Start erescrierepriirsiitr tii iri 254 Flooded SRT s mese 55 ET nyir Ea 254 Fuel Requitements 122 nor gota 044 tiri ewes 318 Jump SEED Cem aseo aoe s wee ded sd 357 Mu lti Displacement 22 65 o Rx RERmeRR 277 vr 374 420 422 Oil Change Interval 2622 v9emg ya 174 183 375 CUL Filer Cap eu pet Ses RUPEE SIE ERR ERN 376 agg a4 664 Ghee Re Gea e he ee ee ees 377 ib Piter Disposal oes ea eared eu cone e v ard 377 Oil Selection aas e ee Bee Chee ods 375 420 OIL Sv BENelG Lows vaceq adu v aree eee Foes os 7 ug 344 lempe rabire Gauge uuu scs boat ve ee oe oe 168 Ense OIl VISCOSID s 3 3 xa Sarees d tiii 376 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 59 Entry System Illuminated 2 326464 o ty ua 18 EEBABOL 25 take ous 4 os Oe Boks ERE eee be
103. 703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44 40 or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Emissions Control System Maintenance 426 O Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 426 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certifie
104. 9 92 4 i4 e Ae deg Red 287 inc m ee ee ee ee ee ae 2 77 296 453 Aone Lile ol TES swiss weg 2 ES ES S 302 JUI Pressure 202239 oe da ka E REEE 296 CHAINS 222993953 9 oS bes ee eee UR ES 305 Changi ui 66a 54 pod 65 eos eos oes 345 349 COIDDDOGE ODIO xaos wee 4 23 58 Bete ee A 299 FatC hanging fede diem Edo de S PX TREES 345 General Information uu 32 vore mr HEA a aes 296 MON DEB 4eney du 2Sede dered Se eb POPE RON 298 Inflation Pressures eee eee 297 PC 348 349 Life of Tires 22 292492 oes 9 99 25x 302 Load Cape 4 40 e a i de ed 26 me ons 292 299 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 308 Pressure Waring Light sss aw seen 176 Udy Gradio oats ae a eG a 99 R09 99 hd 453 Radial 22x94 545 bakes bebe tas EA RE 299 Replacehien sca secos Sw 303 eR IPSA means 303 KOUTON 2442445668 we eb eee GE hs SS 307 cip 4445205 559425 FER oe eee ees 287 296 Del sealINe 32x55 dede shee eee eee SES 304 oe nape he 352 AE ee en PASS RES 288 Oe OUUUU LoaW ULLEALIIL LLLO LLLEAA SHOW Likes 13993 23 9 ERES HIS A PE RE Ep 306 Opare TG T 346 seqni PPP 301 Taler TOWING ersrire em eR SUP merar 336 Tread Wear Indicators uos a es Soe eh ean e gis 302 lo Opon Hood m 128 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 333 Torque Converter Clutch cise o b drm tence Hees 264 lo A CP nae see ebay es eee does 326 24 Hour Towing Assistance 102 Behind a Motor HOME v ucciso deem omes 341 Disabled Ve
105. Base 165 Wi Instrument Cluster Premium 166 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 167 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC E DEG ceu v uev vr t ges PEN E E EDS 180 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Dipli Ea soa ud e esu UPC eae 182 Oil Change Requited ces 429mm os 183 ELTDCERUGBONS ad ucuace Ses 9 soe b edt cir oars 184 D Automatic All Wheel Drive AWD Displays If Equipped D Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped D Compass Display o Navigation If Equipped O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped a eue rents 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect phone If Equipped O Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio O Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio uk dob ue eb bee RU REO ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 92 45 02 n ob teri Ren o Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio D Operating Instructions Radio
106. C the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE e f the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
107. Child Protection Door Lock following procedure To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child 1 Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition Protection Door Lock system 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar object into the child lock control and pull it upward NOTE For emergency key information refer to A Word About Your Keys Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock System Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision 1 Open th door Remember that the rear doors can only be opened c SE 2 from the outside when the child protection locks are 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar object engaged Failure to follow this warning may resultin into the child lock control and pull it downward serious injury or death pu ae NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position
108. Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine _ E _ E Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary t Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Inspect the transfer case fluid
109. ER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED 046405698 Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel surround sound from 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See any stereo audio source A new feature of the KICKER audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode NOTE Dependent on the audio source the output may sound better in stereo or DDS surround mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available to add more sur round audio if desired VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain
110. ERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and po not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined using a seat belt properly areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure
111. Features of Your Vehicle for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect rp MP A PTD Illuminated Vanity Mirror e www dodge com uconnect Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al e or call 1 877 855 8400 lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular e www jeep com uconnect 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conv
112. G YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTI
113. ING YOUR VEHICLE M Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 WARNING Continued WARNING Continue
114. ING x e an ech sos anes en as 169 344 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 451 Pout Gane 3 83 en eee PIE AS Sos 398 Panic Alarm 4 4 ad ene Rue hE T NP EET 29 atkins Drake tc eecdece speakers eacoae dq 277 Passi LIC UN ao sare Gtk Bod e oic 9 3d ad oae 134 Pedal Adjustable o5 sce von Go eee MER Roues 138 Personal DEMES acts aca dea gees pean Ee EORR 191 FOS AM 74 Phone Cellular 2223x449 ese 87 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 87 Placard Tire and Loading Information 292 Power Deck Lid Release 5 146642 ERE E EE AES oF Distribution Center Fuses 403 Door LOCKS 62 ken cg buses eeeae serene tes 29 WHITONS 2420450546896 604204 Ca dn S P eee Re 86 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 153 vcri A 122 E os scs cas Ga d PULS A BUR d ACER A 276 DUNLOC us rae Sea WM ERR RAN ERES 150 inc Me Dr 24 Power Steering Fluid 12s sz ER mh s 424 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 49 Preparation for Jacking u 6 44 site tra tinis 348 Pretensioners og M 47 Programmable Electronic Features 191 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 22d as mea dedos 05 19 Radial Piy DS es 2520339939945 94RE RR PS 299 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 991 Radio Operation OA LL LLOUBLIALILILALLILULLLUuiLOOBoG Gf UocGI ULU LGGAMA0A L DPbP CCHA U eitAAa LD IHUOAUIILHLHttt Radio Rem
115. L control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Pus
116. MENT PANEL 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Cell Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 N vU LA Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the HOME button for approximately two seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the HOME button to exit Navigation If Equipped Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering w
117. Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer
118. Mode e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 MEME CO X MR WE decens mW ET x Woven Mesag SAVE FUEL AME OL OO WE decenas WW k E Gee T ren Average MPG O verace MPG 11 Fuel Saver Mode Off e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous 819793f8 819793f4 Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy 186 UNDERSTANDIN
119. O WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate E EE EAI ETE T I PUSH NUDIO SELECT Ca JE LE DISC 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROL
120. O mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Defrost CH Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Defrost Floor We Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets X69 and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats gt e Bi Level 474 Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air con ditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control dial Press this button a secon
121. ON SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion gt Reset ALL will display during this three second window Automatic All Wheel Drive AWD Displays If Equipped 041005941 Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside Rear Wheel Drive RWD to All Wheel Drive AWD temperature wheel slip or other predetermined condi tions when the vehicle automatically transitions from RWD to AWD the EVIC will display the following message for five seconds 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When the vehicle automatically transitions from AWD to RWD the EVIC will display the following message for five seconds 041005942 All Wheel Drive AWD to Rear Wheel Drive RWD Refer to All Wheel Drive If Equipped in Starting And Operating for more information on the All Wheel Drive AWD system Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stereo e Video Surround e Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound menu press the FUNC TION SELECT button to change surround modes The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio Compass Display i The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and r
122. OTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the WARNING inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Lap Shoulder Belts inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously in
123. Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule l Rotate tires LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Re
124. RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the RUN position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 5 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Press and release the REMOTE START button one time Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle the Key Fob Once inserted the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system to run will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote otart request 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME DOOR LOCKS If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not Manua
125. RSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is on The Electronic Speed Control lever located on the right 3 side of the steering wheel operates the system CAUTION e The pedals can be adjusted while driving Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always TT adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked Electronic Speed Control Lever 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the speed control system is on To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button again The system
126. RSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect Phone The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Conne
127. Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed STARTING AND OPERATING 307 The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed EJ E EIE 055703771 Tire Rotation 308 STARTING AND OPERATING M TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn
128. SP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running The system will turn the ESP BAS Malfunction Indica tor Light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles kilome ters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP BAS ESP is synchronized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position e Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP system will be on even if it was turned off previously e The ESP control system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is NORMAL the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation STARTING AND OPERATING 287 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall
129. STEM CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions 045105297 Remote Sound System Controls Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound VOLUME level Press the bottom of the VOLUME Button button to decrease the sound level Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the D Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio and media mode information AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle MODE Button If the Compass Temp Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the mode will change i e from AM to FM to Media mode etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp gt Audio screen press the FUNCTION SE LECT button to operate various radio me FUNCTION dia and Universal Customer Interface SELECT UCI functions i e advance presets se Button lect next folder jump to or start playing songs in playlists etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle and i
130. System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock Brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Low Fuel Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The MIL will turn on when EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 the key is in the ON position before engine start If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK WARNING to ON have the condition checked promptly A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced T above can reach higher temperatures than in normal Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The
131. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set fo
132. The top compartment holds small items such as a pen and note pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also con tains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins A slot in the left and right side of the top compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptop s cellular phones or other electrical equipment The con sole s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injuty The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play ar
133. Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating e Oil Change Required with a single chime Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver
134. UMENT PANEL SS INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 8lcb31db 1 Air Outlet 7 Climate Control 13 Hood Release 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Heated Seat Switch 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 Power Outlet 15 Headlight Switch 4 Electronic Stability Program OFF Button Traction 10 Ash Tray f Equipped Control System OFF Button 5 Glove Compartment 11 Storage Compartment 6 Radio 12 Ignition Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM Lj eco Foor Rm 950 ni A 040305874 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Trip Odometer Button Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it Base Cluster The word Irip will appear when this button is pressed Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles km A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer
135. UR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 2 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 3 5L Engine Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard M 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 2 7L Engine TE10MCC5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 3 5L Engine ZFR5LP 13G Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 2 7L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 3 5L and 5 7L Engines 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1
136. VERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears To reset the trans mission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the transmission cannot be reset see your authorized dealer NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible AutoStick Electronic Range Select ERS Your vehicle may be equipped with AutoStick or Elec tronic Range Select ERS to provide greater driver con trol of automatic transmission operation Refer to AutoStick in this section 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Electronic Range Select ERS If Equipped Electronic Range Select ERS allows the driver to limit the highest available transmission gear providing you with more control of the vehicle ERS allows you to ma
137. a tes se d wea ST ERA RSS 13 PCT 12 13 Ienibon Key ISemoyvol s ua puro ond Eutr cod oa 13 MOTE ENUY ote bortd s CR x d IRURE E yh 18 Immobilizer Sentry Key uuu ooa a Yo ep pees 15 Infant Restraint 6 uoo Ex bere yox 9 ex CR RS 64 65 Information Center Vehicle LL 180 Inside Rearview Mirror eee 83 Instrument Cluster ees 165 167 Instrument Panel and Controls 164 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 402 EEEELLLLLLISIIIIILLIIIIIGUULIILUIISIILLIIILEGIUeIHILLCILCG GU AAAIuUUGD Ie LGUG QUIGLL49GCLLUO BDSLUugGD OG AAAAG L P cevtoOniiAiieaolHeLLLLL LL LLULILBIJlHALLAA ALL 200717 interior Appearance Care uds rex RESET ES 400 Interior PUGES paer 24854625 6 a4 Pot og dob 403 Ite op Ios oos e e 9er eae eens rig 134 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 136 IOCMION 4 4 65 cade sb Ge ca eee pos E ea Jack LOCION vs aos 9 Ere re ES MENGE dU S eae 346 Jack Operaio s 2a e d 99 Ure fie d RR RE 349 Jacking SNSHUCHONS dw cee we ecu ug d ted 349 JUD ORS ba vaca ee oe EO Rod gor Card oa 357 Key PEOPEQIRIDIRD s sees EROR bens Hewes eas 16 Key Replacement ancy v aces oe yee eines E iot 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 5 3 93 oxyde 9 Sos Sees 15 ISev In Reminder soe ona aeetegeeeaey Sow ces 14 Keyless Entry Systemi ss s 44 RXHEUR Ghee ae Fed 5 19 EOG 295 u S e EORR PIE RE OPE e 12 Kicker Sound Sy Sle 4h eho ek RAE ES En 231 Knee Bolster 422 R
138. ables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting E WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 361 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and DRIVE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equippe
139. acement Bulbs llus 411 W Bulb Replacement oi cincitrtacevadaedes 412 0 Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp And Front Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps o Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID D Backup Lamp Side Marker Lamp Tail Turn Lamp And Tail Stop Lamp O License Lamp W Fluid Capacities B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts O Engine o Chassis MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 7L 070510654 1 Integrated Power Module 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L s 070910695 6 Engine Oil Fill 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 1 Integrated Power Module 2 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Integrated Power Module 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Co
140. activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING WARNING Continued e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip 1he ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting
141. again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 A irat um ae me sears S SUR RE RA EE TE p us SE S I A um Window Lockout Switch Reset Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the AUTO up function will be disabled To reactivate the AUTO up feature perform the following procedure after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows do
142. agraph with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear a chime turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service 9 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE e Acontinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for six to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first PN turned ON If the light is either not on during starting turns on while driving or stays on have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Ihings To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will jee sound to warn of an overheated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature is critically hot If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos sible Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 12 El
143. an in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M in SET DECEL Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE CEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal The automatic transmission will downshift while climb ing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occ
144. ance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command vR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted an
145. are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 loading may be required for hig
146. arter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then the engine has started ignite and damage the repeat the Normal Starting procedure converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will If the engine fails to start after you have followed the decrease as the engine warms up Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again 256 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on e Shift into
147. ary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placar
148. ated Power Mod ule IPM 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse E Fuse zw Heated Seats If i as Equipped 10 Amp AC Heater Control 20 Amp Fuel Pump Red Cluster Security Mod e ule If Equipped as Digi nk Come QUUM 20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake Mod Yellow ule If Equipped E Amp Diagnostic Link Connec Blue tor DLC Wireless Con trol Module WCM 20 Emm Cluster a Ignition Node Yellow 20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet Yellow 10 Amp Stop Lights Red MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 2 ee ee 80 mm 10 Amp Mirrors Steering Con trol Module SCM BL e ex e CNNN CREER CREE CR GN NN G NNI ES 26 NENNEN 27 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con s Red troller ORC A 28 10 Amp Ignition Run AC Heater Amp Antenna Module If Red Control Headlights Orange Equipped Power Mir Occupant Restraint Con rors troller ORC 36 20 Amp Hands Free Phone If 29 5 Amp Cluster Electronic Sta Yellow Equipped Video Moni Orange bility Program ESP If tor If Equipped Radio Equipped Powertrain 97 15 Amp Transmission Control Module PCM Blue STOP LIGHT Switch 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 Amp Cargo Light Satellite 44 20 Amp Amplifier If Red R
149. ation from the impact sensors e Do not put anything on or around the airbag at the front of the car covers or attempt to open them manually You may The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an damage the airbags and you could be injured impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of because the airbags may no longer be functional low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet designed to open only when the airbags are inflat the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended ing WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any Way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc airbag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the NOTE head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down and or SABIC airbag
150. ator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 20 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level c
151. ays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in
152. b from the ignition switch and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition switch the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the DRIVE position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to either the ON or START position engine running or no
153. bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Front Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC WARNING Continued which may receive inform
154. begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly the radio to exit this screen on or above the antenna ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios Reception Quality While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio Satellite reception may be interrupted due to
155. bility problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ee E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacture
156. button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 KICK
157. cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will appear in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the igniti
158. ccurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings a The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you
159. ce MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery
160. ce taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick Electronic Range Select ERS If Equipped By using the AutoStick Electronic Range Select ERS mode and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn of
161. ce Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Xe button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is
162. celeration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal
163. cle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren WARNING Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child
164. cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components
165. connect Phone Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold t
166. could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sa Preparations for Jacking 4 Turn OFF the ignition 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery a Black the Genk and cease oe ie wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the il i Ml jl M H al ati pi am jf IN M jl i PERFETTE i 5 vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever into PARK en WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 349 Jacking and Changing a Tire WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run t
167. creased ease of maneuverability WARNING in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical Continued operation with reduced power steering steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi Service should be obtained as soon as possible tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may Occur e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time Power Steering Fluid Check This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION
168. ctivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use o
169. d e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake moisture failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing Fluid Level Check the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be required For this reason the dipstick is omitted taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Automatic Transmission If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction have Continued your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission
170. d by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly
171. d or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting and Operating for further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring 362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flatbed towing is recommended DO NOT tow an AWD vehicle with the rear wheel
172. d after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command vr button and say Help or Main Menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command EVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system
173. d or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck 302 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING Tires and the spare tire
174. d pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled
175. d the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If so equipped use the finger pull to open the door Otherwise push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Door STARTING AND OPERATING 815afa56 323 324 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee CAUTION NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 8178cbce aces Gas Cap Tether Hook ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten th
176. d time to turn off the air eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 conditioning An indicator in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected NOTE To control the air conditioning manually the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position e Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily An indicator in the button illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil ity For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost Floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solutio
177. d with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNINCG Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPARS fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become
178. dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach switch is first turned ON ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized The light remains on after the approximate six to dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso eight second interval ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized dealer NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label e The light comes on and remains on while driving en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed de
179. depending on which radio is in the vehicle Refer to Remote Sound System Controls 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK e Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Low Tire Pressure ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped SERVICE AWD SYSTEM All Wheel Drive AWD system is not functioning properly and service is required Channel Transmit Channel Training ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 e Channel Trained e Clearing Channels e Channels Cleared e Did Not Train e Insert Key Turn To Run refer to Remote Starting System in
180. driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK e Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position then start the engine e Shift into DRIVE and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer 5 service is required 266 STARTING AND OPERATING M Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added p
181. e Normally air enters from outside the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M re used Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped rapidly The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn the air conditioning on A C and off When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An indicator in the button will illuminate when compres sor operation is selected 045605184 Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Dual Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the mode control knob on the right to AUTO and place the blower control knob on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Then dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver or passenger temperature control knob Once the comfor
182. e please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for th
183. e trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll
184. e you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Memo Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In l l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the e Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the Voice Command EVR System Setup E button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you the following commands may say the following commands Save to save the memo e Language German Continue to continue recording e Language Dutch Delete to delete the recording e Language Italian e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos Language English During the playback you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop playing memos You
185. e RE E S 50 51 Lane Change and Turn Signals 199 Lane Change ASSIS 2uesssaor p88 Pre EHE ed 139 Lap shoulder Dells Sues nae cgit deos de d den 41 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Children cyan eede eee ER eee ES 68 69 arch IGS Dr 42 i 4 wh geek ee Gare a 5 5 eee eS Bees eH y is vr 128 Lead Free Gasoline 000 0 ee eee 318 beaks Fluid ues bbw t HOP re oru e e s 77 IET CTS M JCS TREE T EET TIT TIER TO 302 List BUlDS 132229 hey E RRIVPRETEZETICERES SR 77 All Pr es 77 130 PONS PE 51 57 62 76 170 Alarm M PRTRPRPEFT 176 ABUSO uouxa 645445 ES CA Sd SES SEE 178 Automabe Lieadleghlls sas scs t9 RE RR PET 130 Brake Assist MODUM serere RETE RT RIS 286 Brake Warning Pulb Replacenebl 5 24542909 399 55999 Ea 411 412 Courtesy Reading 3 23 95 p narr dee Rar 5 134 143 Au D 167 Day me KUNTINE a ok oe be eee ee S xS ES 132 Dimmer Switch Headlight 132 133 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 286 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 168 Engine Temperature Warning 170 EXtCHOn Vu mes u vera due tees Pewee Wee Ss 77 j TP 152 172 Hazard Waring Piasner a eu x sosce e opem gen 344 Headlight Switch si s s sse FH os hae A EEE es 130 CACO P 130 415 Headlights On Reminder 192 Headlights On With Wipers 131 138 Higa Ded saeg s pa iaoei ERO bee ae E ia 133 171 Migh
186. e STARTING AND OPERATING 261 When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Shift Lever Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the Gear Ranges parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and PARK ae possible injury or damage pe S1c93e7a This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position 262 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the PARK position REVERSE This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward Always stop be
187. e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 318 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses Shue eee ue eee eee eases KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 7L Engine The 2 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel 87 lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular 800dfab amp gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RMy METHOD 3 5L and 5 7L Engine The 3 5L and 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and perfor mance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these en gines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Rey METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline
188. e between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Continued 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru ment panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact
189. e corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the vm button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The Uconnect Phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are at
190. e desired entry and say The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you Delete wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the 6 VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have
191. e gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will appear in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 326 STARTING AND OPERATINC M VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the dri
192. e minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or le
193. e to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty 5 weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 328 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWKRs e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the re
194. e to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur attempt jump starting because the battery could rup ture or explode and cause personal injury Battery temperature must be brought above freezing point before attempting a jump start Preparations for Jump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the 6 engine compartment for jump starting 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE The remote battery posts are viewed by standing Remote Battery Posts on the right side of the vehicle el over the fender WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Remote Negative Post 2 Remote Positive Post 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 359 3 If using a another vehicle to jump start the battery
195. e use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 322 STARTING AND OPERATINC M Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behin
196. ea by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WARNING Continued e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear WARNING Continued e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when
197. eceiver SDARS Video Blue Equipped Sunroof If If Equipped Vehicle Equipped mou Modes ag Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses Equipped circuit breakers that are only serviceable by an autho P IL t x E se S rized dealer The cluster and the driver seat switch if d fused by the 25 A t break 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview AA UEPE ee dos ee edidi Cavity 11 The passenger seat switch if equipped is Orange Mirror If Equipped y P 5 TEPE Heated Beats it fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12 The Equipped Switch Bank door modules the driver power window switch and the passenger power window switch are fused by the M ee ee ee rane Blower Motor Amp circuit breaker eic d If you experience Pink emporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service 30 Amp E Rear Window Defroster Pink es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Int
198. ecommendations 74 REISE Ween RRR eGe aha ghee ines a W Saiety TIPS MERC 74 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with
199. ection e If the transmission temperature gets too hot the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en gage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down After cooldown Overdrive will resume normal operation 3 Third This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The transmis sion will operate normally in 1st 2nd and 3rd while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis tress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than in other gear range selections 260 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION DOES e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These practices can cause overheating and damage to the transmis sion Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may
200. ectronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The yellow Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indi cator Light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running The system will turn this light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both ESP BAS WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be beneficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in acci dent 14 Oil Pressure Warning Light evi This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes
201. ed by the chain and other suspension components it is important manufacturer In addition only install tire chains on that only chains in good condition are used Bro P215 65 R17 and P225 60 R18 size tires The P245 45 ken chains ee See S damage Stop the R20 size tires do not provide adequate clearance for tire vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could chains indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire CAUTION Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Continued Continued 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method
202. ed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulti
203. ed leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft Ib 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 7 For vehicles equipped with center caps install the center cap by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the center cap 8 Stow the jack tools and spare tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 WARNING When temperatures are below the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damag
204. ee Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break
205. ee Eee ee kes a ees 319 Multi Displacement Engine System 277 Multi Function Control Lever 132 New Vehicle Break In Period 74 Occupant Restraints ss serenate dw dee amp 39 56 60 Occupant Restraints Sedan 52 56 58 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 318 422 Odometer 433445 ve 5 Seed bee oe eae Yu 167 172 DP Rec 167 172 Oil Change Indicator 35 4 eed vers Ex EO RES 174 183 Oil Change Indicator Reset 174 183 LEN CING 546555 ou 5555554654 e554 64 374 422 Capacity s4a ensece cae eee ees RE 420 Chaos IPEA s 3 05458 ae0 PEE QUSS 174 183 375 Sud rr C T 374 Iron 3444044 S55 05 EEEE eee eS 374 Disp sal TP DIU Fae ies redusce 4 Gee ERA ES ERE 377 422 Filter Disposal 406 adessctop sera qe tirni sirs 977 ldentihcation 000 o 226 vacedeards ensues 375 Materials Added tO s imasi moe y aeeai mss Syd Recommendation 254 ommo 375 420 DVIMCHO sardaa Fee ee E0373 08 2 94 RCA ERROR 377 oo rnm 376 420 Oil Filter Change ag 234 3 vce dedere d Rd Ex 9 7 Oil Filter Selection eee 377 Onboard Diagnostic System 370 371 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 143 OCperaune Precautions uouresoues spcaeieegss ace 370 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 A INDEX 469 Outside Rearview Mirrors leen 84 OUGICI D serirrps rE REOR EG S FORE E E 262 Overhead Console 45 2d sabre RR sou 142 Overneatno FAC
206. ee your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will
207. ehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635
208. eing shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go always remember to place the ignition in OFF At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Ke
209. elease the HOME button to display one of eight compass HOME readings and the outside temperature Button NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows mm 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the HOME button for approximately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRU
210. eplace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C
211. er and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD a If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD
212. er control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park ing lights or headlights are on 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031507267 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are six de
213. er s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system meets the seatback and are just visible when e you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach
214. er situa tions Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 move the shift lever to the right or left D D while in the DRIVE position The gear position will display in the instrument cluster In the AutoStick mode the transmis sion will shift up and down when left or right D D is manually selected by the driver It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear Tapping the shift lever to the D position at a stop will allow starting in second gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift D the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right D for a few seconds You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an active on demand All Wheel Drive AWD system which makes available optimum traction
215. erior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment Irunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578 Vibor Vanity OI suce doe i eraa pens A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 Door COUPIOSV 122 25 3 8 1X Hoe SR Re d ed d 562 Shift Indicator Lamp s lt ee ehh JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlamp Standard Halogen 9006 Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge HID on aredonac todo tux edt ad aee et DIS Serviced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlamp suu sack qa au quie fe OE ey 9005 Front Park Dan Lamp vae dor ESSE 3157A Front Fog Lamp If Equipped PSX24W Front Side Marker 6250 deen adh oe acta ee oe 194 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Tail Stop Lamp s ei ie ote hae ee oan eee eka a4 3057 Taly Turn Lamp ser ee eon ed vedi wg ed es d 3057 Rear Side Marker cas cracks eq qe pa 445 siai 168 BackUp LAMP sasara dar suus re b E ead tee 921 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMOD ea e e E E EE S LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Eni POTUIT 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Head
216. ersation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button Depending on the vehicle options either the R radio or the mirror will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone button and vr Voice Command button that will en able you to access the system Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra N VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Fr
217. et off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid AII Wheel Drive AWD M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequen
218. evious track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 e RND button available on sales code RES radio only knob fast will scroll through the list faster During Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is the information on the radio display Sowing OORA C A S CoU USUS e Du
219. ew through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 WARNING Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for convex mirror will loo
220. f long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name
221. f equipped with UCI When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp A Audio screen press the SCROLL button to v seek up and down radio stations tracks SCROLL chapters files etc depending on which Button radio is in the vehicle CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily c
222. f temporarily ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Two Wheel Drive and All Wheel Drive Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground is allowed ONLY if the rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in NEUTRAL for both RWD and AWD vehicles WARNING If the driveshaft is removed the vehicle can roll even if the transmission is in PARK which could cause serious injury or death The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa tion The parking brake must remain engaged unless the vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow vehicle or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled See your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal and reinstallation procedures including flange orientation alignment use of thread locking compound proper bolt torque specifications etc CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Mi Hazard Warning Flasher 344 B If Your Engine Overheats 344 Bl Jacking And Tire Changing 345 0 Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 346 O Preparations For Jacking 348 O Jacking And Changing a Tire 349 El COmpacl
223. f the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NS MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays Integrated Power Module 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE tridge Fuse e When installing the integrated power module Fuse cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Blue 25 Amp Powertrain Control Natural may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 15 Amp Diesel PCM If Blue Equipped 25 Amp Ignition Coils Injectors Natural Short Runner Valve 25 Amp Headlamp Washer Relay Natural If Equipped 30 Amp Starter Green EN EN EHE use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating 4 25 Amp Alternator EGR Sole The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Natural noid PL NEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Descripti
224. fant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH s
225. fore moving the shift lever to REVERSE CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK to the ON position NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis sion damage WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident D Overdrive This range is used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy Select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers NOTE e Ifthe vehicle is started in cold temperatures shifts into Overdrive may be delayed Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera ture Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this s
226. from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 282 STARTING AND OPERATING M All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Program ESP All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive spe
227. ft to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Program type Display 16 Digit Character Program Type isl Display No program type or un 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name
228. g Lights If Equipped 132 MES TR on onc ooh eck ees 124 O Multifunction Lever 04 132 3 Heated Seats If Equipped 126 A ore eae ons d dee eee s 133 3 Folding Rear Seat If Equipped 127 O Lane Change 5918 oss c9 3 3 e420 en S 133 B Io Open And Close The Hood 128 O High Low Beam Switch 5 133 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 O Flash Io Pass ay uos 2ic 9d e PE trea E 134 EO Ped iva 30 9 Io 4 9 rerh rR RS 141 D Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 134 Eo Resume pee esa ans ead d 9 ee gn ty 141 BLIBIGOIOE LIBI x uoa woo x Boedo anii RR ie 134 o To Vary The Speed Setting seme eh 141 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 136 o To Accelerate For Passing O Intermittent Wiper System 136 W Overhead Console 00 EL Windshield Washers s eus eui irei wee B 137 t Courtesy Reading Lights uuu teh 143 LIIS DEO OUO 64 4 6 444 gar ior doa Sd ee as 197 US ngldsses DIORdB ua soe eot er es 143 o Headlights On With Wipers Available With lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 143 Automatic Headlights Only 138 7 Programming HomeLink 145 W Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 138 Beats Onertor Cansdantmemmeure 27 Bl Electronic Speed Control 139 O Using HomeLink 00000000 148 PIGAC Ate pets oaks 5 qon doces She a eee 140 O Repro
229. g either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 sunroof Fully Closed The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray has Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the power available only when the ignition is in the ON or sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amps electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power Front Power Outlet rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNINCG Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicle s not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury
230. gency 2 4ekee a 39 Trunk Release Remote Control 97 Tum Ndal aos succ ed qp oe Hear ee do Oed A 133 169 DCE COMMCCION 2 24 Rec Ex PRA ERES ES 221 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 87 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 453 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 221 Universal Transmitter llis 143 Unleaded Gasoline 00 00 eee 318 Untwistine Procedure Seat Belt 252i e 46 Variub MITOS oast pk ace p i49 QA A 44245840584 86 Variance COMPASS o 2 sucesor 496 Re esas Re eS 190 Vehicle Certification Label sais 326 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 229 654 43 dob ux eso s 293 326 327 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 VoM e LOE repa eges d ESL Ee d 246 411 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 44 4 acce Soter eoes 232 ACSEOSIDU EXIT CUM gain a arg PD aret vcra Poen d 376 Voice Recognition System VR Les 115 Warning Flasher Hazard 0 4 344 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 167 Warnings and Cautions sscenieseae eR 6 Warranty Information Washer Adding Fluid nA d UANUGueEAPGLILIOA LLCLUUli LAGUCG uN OLLALLAoO 6ADGUGI4Uu0AuLL H Q INo LLOGOC Washers Windshield 136 137 384 Wass VOhilclBos i us pep Ee RUP OR 914 Pob e eet 398 Water Driving TOU acea kc aduCR qup 9 9 ae c 27
231. ghts are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 021307469 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehic
232. gramming A Single HomeLink EB To Set ALA Desired Speed 2e t 140 lio PPP enw m 148 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie sh uidi ED 148 O Troubleshooune Tipe essere deini rareo 149 O General Information 149 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 150 O Opening Sunroof Express 151 O Closing Sunroof Express 151 A Pinch Protect Feature peser aw 6H a e445 151 O Pinch Protect Override uoc oues ge ex ERR I51 O Venting Sunroof Express 151 O Sunshade Operation isses 152 AWind DUMeUNS siare os 9 2 0 3 oes ee bend 152 OG nrool Maintenance ses dice viae v reg s 152 Bleniton Off Operaion os idea 256a so mids 192 O Sunroof Fully Closed 34 44 mq 4 69 9 dE 153 Bl Electrical Power Outlets 153 W Cupholders 4 4aceas aeeoe kee aren denen 156 O Front Seat Cupholders ossis serete riesia 156 O Rear Seat Cupnolders cs teeta ve T Ps 156 _ ion a m 157 O Console Features 2o ob ca ne to caw aed 2 157 D Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Lax vue ex 158 W Rear Window Features 159 E Rear Window Defroster s 248s 44 o ars 159 W Load Leveling System If Equipped 160 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the vi
233. h speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity 300 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tempor
234. h the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 1
235. ha gb es 318 Dorn PP C oe ak E aS 323 P Te ehlihi NOR pos bho ee heehee ee bee Ee 321 Clean A errero 4 cee ES ERSTE Pe ee 319 CORSON 44454855 oy TP REG PA ERST RES 184 aena sas 4 4 G44 ere eS oka se REGN SORORE 319 a EEEELLLLLIIIIILIGILIGULLIIILISIILLIILLLHI CIL ILAGC L I BALUOGSOGA GLILLLLULLUL amp A LCmHi Ji sdio dLPA UAGUBoGGEAGG GJJooSALLDuuleNrS s eo e wo oILUUuLUL AAAAG DAAABGGGB L ULP 3 Sb 1X Piller Cao T AS Cap 44 udi e 2 eens eeae S9 be 323 eu aoe eng bbe ee eee ae eae 318 e p PET 167 Materials Added eee eee 921 Methanol wag 2 4 444 4 65 3 93 a REA Ed eT Pr 319 Octane Rane s2ice utiatectsGeavaed ds 318 422 Requirements 22422 9ca sce Ee uS ER SUR agus 318 Saver Mode iaa deg d eade PERRA RS 184 DDOCINGSUOBS uses eig uuu Eau e Pd ed wes 422 Tank 4 apaclb aoa acier aopd eq kovenea ee gore 420 Duel System Caution srira tinas padi Roue 324 POCOO Shen ah serea 323 c outa hie ena RnaG eE e mE RE 403 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 143 Gas Cap Fuel Piller Cap sos a s sir Rs 925 970 Gasoline Clean Air 422242 319 Gasoline Fuel COBSOLVIDE s eece eee ere 1d 4 eae qe i 184 Gasoline Reformulated 319 Gauges Coolant Temperature aos quide ten care eeu 168 Piel x2222999 259 R24392449 9 E 167 SU srertrera rie paeau EA E 172 wars elo METER 167 Tachometer 3363344 9398 Xa E 3cORGO ES SORA 167 Gear RANGES uuu 5 tee fa ht ean eie CAES 261 266 General Information
236. hag aes 447 O Prepare For The Appointment 447 APrepare A List 4444 fevered apne ade aes 447 o Be Reasonable With Requests 447 W If You Need Assistance 447 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 448 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 448 Hn Medco Contactes 2a x Ee xc bruts uai 448 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY D Service Contract W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 450 EM MOPAR Parts accoesa cade accio es 450 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 450 O In The 50 United States And Washington pc ee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee a 450 0 n Canada 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee W Publication Order Forms 451 O Traction Grades ws xps ems etes etes 453 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Temperate Grades s ors PR ew ee ean E 454 Quality Grades sy Shes 88 ed bee ORE E OE 453 HE Tread wear 2 21 92 3 0 acre sc Ss 453 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List
237. have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best S E 2 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbi
238. he vn button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the vr button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Command system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e When navigating through an a
239. he button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 D 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to m the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the Tether Strap Mounting child Use only the anchor positions directly behind
240. he engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES P t SIOA Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 2 If equipped with steel wheels do not remove the wheel cover at this time If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle 81330194 Center Cap Removal WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges and retention teeth WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange while
241. hecked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed i Fach tire including the spare if provide
242. heel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu display is active the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn by Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a pro grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display
243. hicle lt usua d 4c3oE don eS Ebr d Gs 362 OdG C 332 Recreational ska qx eeaeee Aera de Bd 241 WICK ore G 2cuei cdd i CS JORCA Reet REI E oe RC 332 TOWING ASsIStANCe aegre dex iod doit a ee ese d 102 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 341 Trachon CONUM vues ombre hes PRSE beh ee ss 282 Trader TOWING arere ETES Shs e dolos Sol ee 4 328 Cooling System lips 4 4 45 5555 45s ERE dm 340 pie Pr 330 Nirmum RequiremietifS s ux s dure deg ded ra 334 jp 339 Trailer and Tongue Weight 333 YIO odio desea dy 9 RR EUR UR D 3e eR ES 338 Trailer TON UICE 24525445 9 gare cans oa ea 992 Trailer Weihe 2 5 20 dore eto REG Ran REP 332 icu Case PPP 997 FG PD 397 424 NEGDIEDINEB gpeg renyai dos Gee Eg 997 Tans DOISSIOD 457445464404 804 oe eee ERR 295 Automatic seen 256 260 266 395 PO us E eee eats du ERES ERE 424 Range Indicator 2265046544 a2 caesar 261 266 DIIS 1245764 9294 3 59b EE eee he RESO 256 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry seeds re 542664455 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 143 A INDEX 475 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless ENY sa4 406 act podes dedo isi es 19 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Mans POUINe Cts 42 ite gms Sopa teaks koe d 74 Tread Wear Indicators llis 302 TInp Odom ssasrsprere patent gon qu doap 167 172 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 24 sx RES REFS 37 39 Trunk Release Emer
244. i EMI 270 Fluid and Filter Changes sess remi cee eee as 396 EIL Canes auci wd ob Erud edid d 396 Fluid Level Check 2ussvesceem xs 395 PEA PP ees eens a ghee ees 424 e durum 261 266 Overdie 29399 c3 99 S3 one EN oe ee et 262 vini uar 260 266 PECA S COUPS 2265 qr bu oboe ea RUE A ER ORSE 997 lorgue Converter 4 045554 4569s RECRPRSR SA 264 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 265 268 incur A PR 270 Pode EMG audaces ed Simp a dx ee ee 424 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 424 rua 44 DP 378 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Ios P 378 Delite e e E E BS EE 41 76 Body Mechanism Lubrication 383 DsESTAE LOCUM sue hace nee ed cone bows as 297 Brake Assist Systemi 2 34 dw Ve de iced tiki 283 Brake Control System Electronic as osos nom 282 Drake Fd 2432446664 eevecar ese gee PR d Drake Tanking docs nq S 6442 bees ee DP Drake oy SIGUE X013 83 RR en obo EU ERST PEN Anti Lock ABS RII IRE LLLILLLIILLILILIIIIILILLLUIIULIILULILLLLLULIIILILLUL LUGUeULLSHILTLEALATALILLLLOLLLLL cCLCEHLUIL LA A GLILLEGUALGGGHoAH GUGuUOGU AUUA 440 LLIUOADLLOA Fluid Check 59324399959 eas 55 oS 394 424 Master Cylinder i o ride 99 o5 mb eer 394 PLOD xou sa qe Es peoa d d eee ogee 277 Warning Ligii M Vas Dic MMC 999 Brake Transmission Interlock 259 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 74 Brightness Interior Lights esae Re seres 135 B
245. ices the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with
246. in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the b
247. include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor
248. ing Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The st
249. involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department immedi ately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 452 vehicle system and or components is written i
250. io 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 2205 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected
251. ion These devices improve the performance of the seat belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer
252. irflow distribu tion The mode settings are as follows e Defrost CH Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles NOTE To improve fuel economy leave in defrost only when necessary e Defrost Floor We Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets Xf and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats i UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 e Bi Level ugh Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to partially block airflow e Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Recirculation Control The mode control knob also controls the recir ce culation feature You can choose Bi Level Re circulation air outlets Panel Recirculation air outlets or a mix or both while in this mod
253. ition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting 6 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera WARNING ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Maintaining Your Vehicle and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap par
254. its own brakes and they This could cause inadequate braking and possible should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this Poona tee could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with WARNING a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic WARNING brake controller is not required e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg Continued 338 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle WARNING Continued but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping Refer to the following illustrations distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result O in an accident O Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring O C Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 4 gt O stoplights and turn signa
255. itters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M E The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead WARNING console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener with out these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance M 033906001 Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan HomeLink Buttons gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can rity Alarm is active cause serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training
256. jured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the belts shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and normal conditions However in a collision the belt will using a seat belt properly lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE J 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident h
257. jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM e Brake switch status e Pedal position e And other configuration Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the parameters depending on vehicle ne THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint syste
258. k smaller and farther away glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled than they really are Relying too much on your by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be passenger side convex mirror could cause you to turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the 3 collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position Power Mirror Control After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the
259. kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of 204 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs NOTE 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs e The following table shows examples on how to calcu 295 kg late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle Occupants Combined weight of TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo from Tire Placard EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 865 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 865 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib ess 160 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs
260. l Door Locks inside the vehicle before closing the door To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the WARNING door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win Door Lock Plunger dows other controls or move the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Power Door Locks accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Remov A power door lock switch is on each front door trim ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors operate If a door is open the Key Fob is in the ignition xS cum mere and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob as Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following c
261. l manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is built into the head light switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunc
262. lamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp and Front Side Marker Lamp Models with Halogen Headlamps 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise 818ec ba 1 High Beam Headlamp Bulb 2 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 818ec6c7 818ec6e2 3 Park Turn Lamp Bulb 4 Side Marker Lamp Bulb ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp and NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps Park Turn Lamp Models with High Intensity when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to Discharge Headlamps HID the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after HID Headlamps approximately 10 seconds as the system charges The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube Backup Lamp Side Marker La
263. late The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to infla
264. lay settings which allow you to regulate the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlights On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlight
265. lder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate a
266. lear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System 045607730 Manual Temperature Controls 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Blower Control A s 045607735 The rotary knob on the left controls the blower The control has an OFF posi tion and four speed settings The blower will remain on until the con trol is turned to the OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control um mm 9 e Pd H MAX UBSEC ES 045607736 The rotary knob in the center controls air temperature Rotate the control to the left for cooler air temperature and to the right for warmer air tempera ture Rotating the control to the ex treme left provides the coldest setting Rotating the control to the extreme right provides the warmest setting Mode Control Qo C H ag zi 3 045607737 The rotary knob on the right controls airflow distribution Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the op erator to fine tune a
267. led while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Openin
268. les not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the security alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure
269. limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions
270. low tire pressure values flashing 2845 mi 819793fc Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure inflation value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to le W A Ta F ee E qee gu ESOS m mS c pum Eo E T ES xn ss 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the o A ee ere Sisson GU CERA v NOW Gee T ren TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received gi379401 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ee If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes
271. ls on the trailer are required for motoring safety ot Oa O The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har 057003766 ness and connector Four Pin Connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 Female Pins 4 Park TEE 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn wiring harness P 5 E 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn PIT of refs Oe ae Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 057003765 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select a lower gear range using the 3 range if equipped or the AutoStick ERS feature if equipped NOTE Selecting a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for poli
272. lter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid AII Wheel Drive AWD Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fle
273. ly injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Manual Seats If Equipped WARNING The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust z T T Qc the seat only while the vehicle is parked qu m ue m Manual Seat Adjusting Bar 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Seats If Equipped WARNING The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could recline the seatback The passenger s seat will move up or cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be down forward or rearward properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to
274. m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener 354 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES ee e This tire is designed as an emergency spare only Do ENS not exceed 50 mph 80 km h speed A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control e Keep tire inflated to 60 psi 414 KPa cold inflation pressure en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 355
275. mall children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or Power Sunroof Controls any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 91 034207107 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disab
276. mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential The exterior surface of these compo nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid fill inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the fill inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole Use this plug to add fluid as required The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole Fluid Changes Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary acco
277. ming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you 1 Open the trunk You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If access the jack 2 Lift the a access cover r using me pus Dai you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 81 344fb9 The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack Opening The Access Panel and spare tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire t ES pop 812c5587 Jack Fastener Spare Tire Fastener WARNING 4 Remove the spare tire i E A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack hard stop
278. mp Tail Turn Lamp High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the and Tail Stop Lamp headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned 1 Open the trunk ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Remove two fasteners from the back of the taillamp 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side bly l l assem c 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 12c4b54 3 Pull back the trunk liner 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the taillamp assembly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 7 Pull the taillamp assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly 818ec611 2 Side Marker Lamp Bulb 818ec652 1 Backup Lamp Bulb 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 818ec69d 818ecbac 3 Tail Turn Lamp Bulb 4 Tail Stop Lamp Bulb 9 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 10 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the taillamp as
279. mpering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 WARNING To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the where your exhaust system can contact anything that vehicle can burn e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this should occur safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine OFF and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications immediately 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any
280. ms This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehi
281. n straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to Or find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ee YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to the
282. n of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and
283. n where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used
284. nd sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 125 48 44 1 32 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 Layer 3 Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 2205 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once
285. nd time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage eters ee Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The WARNING Continued parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Alway
286. nding Your In strument Panel for further information An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In lgnition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignition position SENTRY KEYS The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine b
287. ng Additional Transmitters 29 ME Ir nk Salety Warning 24 sd090H8t en neeu des 38 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 24 O Trunk Emergency Release 59 O General Information 25 W Occupant Restraints 0 99 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 p Lap Shoulder Bers is cua eu i e Eae s 41 E How To Use Remote Start xao bens s 26 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 46 Ia Door Locks iue e reed hex ERA 28 o Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode B Manual Door LOCKS 222 9 RE REY 28 Rees eec gndaestantituntum spent d uBowscbsarBede 4 5 4 ce ee 29 O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped 47 O Child Protection Door Lock isses M pria A MM MN T W Windows cob en ve een ese d edd RISE TP SETS 34 SGeat Belts And Precdani Women arrean 49 Owen INGO debentur siete ness es Heat belt Extender uos 29e xo her RS RS 49 El Vd BULTGUN S o scooter dci 64 bete BUR Eo e 37 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 D Supplemental Restraint System SRS O Transporting Passengers 0 74 ADAG SPAS ie Ge A 2 B ITIQNCISCO 4 4544 oe kee ees ten eee a 75 0 Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 56 71 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The 2 D Event Data Recorder EDR 63 bon ax eh ga tS Shue oe eee ee RES eo os 76 OCRE Restraints inne dcm bbe ae e 9 a 64 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Mi Engine Break In R
288. ng from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine 284 STARTING AND OPERATING M power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicat
289. ng must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi tive emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collis
290. nt corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN 010805185 EE INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS un Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Word About Your Keys 12 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 ARY GOR PETRI 13 O Removing Key FOB From Ignition 13 O Key In Ignition Reminder 14 Nu Key cusosortiesesvieO Rete ks 15 O Replacement Keys d va m esti ir ded n 16 O Customer Key Programming 16 O General Information 16 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped O Rearming Of The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System B illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE o To Unlock The Doors D To Lock The Doors oO To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME o Using The Panic Alarm 224 x ego 29 W Trunk Lock And Release 4 2 n 97 O Programmi
291. o and from Cellular Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Svea button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the GVR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the U
292. oad conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick Electronic Range Select ERS mode to select a lower gear Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK RE
293. of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride
294. om a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul der belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the spac
295. on pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location SSE ET ARES E SRA PSERIOR ERIE RE RS AT ESS RE aD i Boo Saat FO Ro SEER SERS PPS SP SS Se NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed ea uu oe SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 1 on the driver s side B Pillar 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The v
296. on tridge Fuse tridge Fuse a Fuse sa a We Wiper Pink E ee Ss a Se ee 3 Amp Anti Lock Brake System 0 LLL E CNN SEN RN 2 e E o Pink ABS Valves If Equipped 12 40 Amp Radiator Fan Green 50 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Red ABS Pump Motor If Baul a E Fan Red 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center _ iei and bu es Rear Power Distribution Center Opening The Access Panel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 CAUTION e When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Ignition Off Draw IOD erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Cavity 1 of the Rear may allow water to get into the power distribution Power Distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system Center contains a black failure IOD fuse needed for vehicle processing dur ing assembly The ser vice replacement part is a 60 Amp yellow car When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over tridge fuse load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it Integrated Power Mod indicates a problem in the circuit that must be ule IPM corrected Integr
297. on pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 298 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard
298. on switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because
299. onditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed Power Door Lock Switch 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Cycle the ignition after performing steps one to four for the feature to be enabled or disabled 6 Re
300. ons Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped front axle fluid All Wheel Drive Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary AWD Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer eee MANTENANCE SCHEDULES 431 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the transfer case fluid AII Wheel Drive AWD Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner fi
301. ons between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon S Spi EVEN EE oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood aoed injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Trunk closed away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button e Battery at an acceptable charge level x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec e RKE PANIC button not pressed onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle e Ignition key removed from ignition switch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release Remote Start mode the UNLOCK button on the
302. ontrolling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the pr
303. oose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Lo tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Base Cluster Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following pro cedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the acceler
304. op down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connec tion can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Towing English uconnect Francais Last Sen Number Biionebesk See Setup on Phone ElewEHaH Flowchart is redialed Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Tree Phonebook Phensbosik Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed SHE Enter Name 1st Confirmation I at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New New Entry Added Nurber Entry is modified Phonebook Cleared Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Set
305. or Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe at tentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 The ESP system has two available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving conditions The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation which allows for mo
306. or by performing the following proce dure NOTE Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de activating the BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way
307. orking with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the vr button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the GVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send th
308. ot lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors B Inside Day Night Mirror D Automatic Dimming Mirror
309. ote Controls sun 255 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 227 hear CUPBOIdeE 2444 054n7 0 EEE RE 156 Rear Seah FOLIE auae Re dos E Ops mre Son e ds 127 Rear Window Defroster lesen 159 Rear Window Features sen 159 Rearview Mirrors 2ueeace ox 54 93 3 3 3 amp e508 YR A 63 Reclining Front Seale 922 uc d uem ened nae e 123 Recreational TOWING ou exque ques x eee vq does 341 Reformulated Gasoline sss 319 IMs TT ETT 381 Release Hood 233 RERRURRE AU ESOS ES 128 Reminder Dig BIG On ers cheney aet peu Saas 4 192 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0000 48 Remote Control Place DIBIGIE Seah aeons de Cod whee dod 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 2 22039 rto d 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 299 Remote Starting SYSTEM 224 44 pernit miite 25 Remote Trunk Release auos eiie o4 v RS PRIORES 37 Replacement Bulbs 4644 prore iiit 9 REL SCA 411 Replacement REUS ccas q23 R3 EE EE eU d ui 16 Replacement Parts Voss koe ar DR tei 372 Replacement Mites srece dos a dope Rara d usta aia 303 Reporting Safety Defects ae aa em ce arias 450 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 174 183 Restraint Head eee 124 Restraints Child 4 460000 3 6e 4e0 e ee84 5 64 Restraints Occupant sesamen i dados 44 ce Ge oo 97 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 22e eme 361 Rotation Tires 232 3 95x01 3 E4354 ERS 307 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
310. ove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e f the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device C
311. ox next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADI
312. oy ed he eee 25 253 Automatic Transmission 209 Engine Fails to Start aces does Rs 254 RO 2o sme e sos d SORA RS A anb aura d qt phe Starting and Operating aue xu undc 3er ois 259 Staru ne Proce Utes uud epe qus e Pure deg i 253 Steering Column COHNUOIS asivipceepdgecieen eee 132 FPOWE a Pr 276 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound DUBIE CONNOIS sis dct hs oad ee Pee eee 235 cp 157 411 Storage Vehicle 25 4 4448 5 ee ena X 246 411 Storing XOU VEMICIC ss doa voe one eee ewes es 411 DICK GICCING 474462044445 oho Ge des Pad 361 DUR ISOO 3 e485 444 46045 ooh se oe b ke oo ee 150 DUNG lasses Storag 24 2 5p oe ghee ee SORS T RES 143 Duntoot Maintenance 0 0656 542004 66844044 152 NS INDEX 473 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 50 Sway Control Traller ose duck eoe don 6 ope ees 329 Oy EGCG ENOG OI sa gat 33 8 E rer EEE egeat 377 System Remote Starting ois sre m om t E s 25 WACHOMCICE 6c atau acia x rreperi etriye ke is 167 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 240 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 168 345 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 68 Theft Alarm Security Alarm iua pode rans 17 Theft Systemi Security Alarm sisse dg 3 mispo c 17 Tune Delay Headlight 2 5 34 ones nbs EE ea 131 Tire and Loading Information Placard 292 Tire Identification Number TIN 290 cR EID LL 287 Tue Satety Information 3 2
313. p to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound 314 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings A The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the
314. paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially al
315. peat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 4 The driver door is opened 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK 5 The doors were not previously unlocked position do not start the engine 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h 3 Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming doors The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled actollows 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer a Programmable Features in Understanding Your In NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature strument Panel for further information in accordance with local laws e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the
316. place the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing All Wheel Drive AWD _I Replace the accessory drive belt 2 7L 3 5L Engines O C O C O L L C L L LL Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter r
317. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e Youcan also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service Continued vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam co
318. preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure T hich 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e iemporary spare tires are high pressure compact Temperature Grades spares designed for temporary emergency use only 288 STARTING AND OPERATINC M Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design s
319. quirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale eee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is e
320. r deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de Maintaining Your Airbag System ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place
321. r SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track numb
322. r recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Materials Added to Fuel CAUTION Continued All gasoline sold in the United States is required to CAUTION Continued contain effective detergent additives Use of additional n out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition detergents or other additives is not needed under normal malfunctions can Cape the catalytic converter to conditions and they would result in additional cost overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or Therefore you should not have to add anything to the some light smoke your engine may be out of tune fuel or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from th
323. rding to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your
324. re wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESP on again by momentarily press ing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS Malfunction Indi cator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS Malfunction ESP BAS 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the E
325. reby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an accident e Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Industry Standard
326. recaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING CAUTION Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK to the ON position REVERSE The following indicators should be used to ensure that This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the NEUTRAL way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the PARK position 268 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis sion damage WARNINCG Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or r
327. rfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum
328. right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set th
329. ring all List modes the iPod displays all lists in l wrap around mode So if the track is at the List Or Browse Mode bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described counter clockwise to get to the track faster below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock Neue undue wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying e Preset 3 Albums the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and e Preset 5 Audiobooks start playing the track Turning the TUNE control e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 6 Podcasts 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current CAUTION list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press
330. rmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the Uconnect system are confirmed To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until EN GLISH or METRIC appears MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Na
331. ropylene glycol based engine HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or coolant antifreeze is not recommended equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance 37 C are anticipated intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte ized water when mixing the water engine coolant nance period it is important that you use the same antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the vehicle Please review these recommendations for using engine cooling system Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant
332. ry Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol en GS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start x2 e Obstructi
333. s Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Dut 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Max Tongue Wt Gross Trailer Wt see note 2 7L amp 3 5L Rear Wheel 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Drive RWD Automatic 3 5L All Wheel Drive 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 lbs 907 Kg 200 lbs 91 Kg AWD amp 5 7L Automatic Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can ca
334. s and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power WINDOW switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears AWD System Displays When in this display you may select ON or OFF When ON is selected the EVIC displays the current mode of the transfer case A five second display appears any time the transfer case changes from All Wheel Drive AWD to Rear Wheel Drive RWD or from RWD to AWD The EVIC also displays the current mode of the transfer case when you shift into drive or reverse To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Confi
335. s released Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the in strument panel lights and if so equipped the lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimm
336. s apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued 280 STARTING AND OPERATING M ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is
337. s eaeeee kee es 60 Abas Light esso e E OO ROSA S 51 57 62 76 170 ADIS Wlaimtenance Vs sioe Geen ghee ae THAO SERE 61 ADAL IGS ase hee eh eee ese eG Gas ese 56 58 Airbag Window Side Curtain 52 56 58 Alim LEIT soc scems a esoaE piaren S REPAS ES 176 Alarm lle 2idey 8b Ga Xecta oscuras B ovas 23 Alarm Sec rity Alam usare i s soot em e 17 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 All Wheel Drive AWD 271 397 Alterations Modifications Vehicle i Antenna Satellite Radio sss 228 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 389 390 420 Disposal P ed 458 eee eee eee 391 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 280 282 Anti Lock Warning Light ie sc eR 178 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Appearance Cale 2484en4 ee tobe eee eden ss 398 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Assistance TOWING 4525240 eres dundee sd ois 102 Auto Down Power Windows 20 E INDEX 457 Auto Unlock Doors eee 30 Auto Up Power WINdOWS eseas 65r 36 Automatic Dimming MITO uei Sane x ded 84 Automatic Door Locks less 29 30 Automatic Headlights 222299 aye wd 130 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 174 183 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 240 Automatic Transaxle Decal A OOIIDUES uu v es vor uc 1b d PORC US d SEE 397 Automatic Transmission 260 266 395 396 POC IG eea eene Boa DS hope oa 396 424 iw
338. s on both sides of the vehicle ward covering both windows on the impact side may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu pant protection Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm fr
339. s on the ground unless the rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in NEUTRAL Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed with rear Wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU TRAL under the following conditions e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 24 km e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h CAUTION Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 363 Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the ground or the rear driveshaft removed with no limita tion on speed or distance CAUTION e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 24 km then the only approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck Otherwise damage to the trans mission may result Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the key must be in the ON position not the ACC posi
340. s will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield un Ner hr witch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the l D accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the transmission 40 km h is in REVE
341. se grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
342. sembly and then turn it clockwise ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 uus 11 Reinstall the taillamp assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk liner 12 Close the trunk License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES Engine Oil with Filter ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 U S Metric Cooling System 2 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 9 9 Quarts 9 4 Liters Formula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive MOPAR Antifreeze 11 1 Quarts 10 5 Liters Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 11 4 Quarts 10 8 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 14 7 Quarts 13 9 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 15 1 Quarts 14 3 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 422 MAINTAINING YO
343. senger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ie CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional ta
344. sh and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush witha e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly result in engine damage and may decrease corro dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Selection of Coolant specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool possible ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi information tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued When adding engine coolant antifreeze e This vehicle has not been designed for use with The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR propylene glycol based engine coolant anti Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula freeze Use of p
345. shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple
346. should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 304 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating
347. should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare
348. solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or i
349. t and the brake pedal must be pressed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To access the override remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position without starting the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 4 Using the screwdriver press and hold the override tab Four Speed Automatic Transmission If through the access port on the center console Equipped NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears EE rr EET Interlock Manual Override 5 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 7 Reinstall the override cover e
350. t level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation Air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing the air conditioning control button while in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request ing the air conditioning is not necessary The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the recirculation con trol button will temporarily put the system in Recirculation mode 10 minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the indicator in the control button to 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See illuminate After 10 minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the
351. t belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract back into the retractor Tighten web bing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by de pressing t
352. t the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or pie Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 54352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures 253 D Automatic Transmission 253 O Normal Starting Tip Start 254 D Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 iugis 1 e po 254 OT Engine Fails To Start lt lt give adam ed d ur vs 254 PLACE Sarig oe ooo qa does Sanne sate wes 200 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 256 Bl Automatic Transmission 256 O General Information 257 H Key Ignition Park Interlock O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System o Brake Transmission Interlock Manual O gerra eE ERS 259 D Four Speed Automatic Transmission KEGU O duae op ade teks pee dr urs 260 A Geat RAC es on c dS bag eE n 261 D Five Speed Automatic Transmission IG UIpPed P 266 250 STARTING AND OPERATING M Fi Gear RIN OS DC 266 W AutoStick If Equipped 270 ail A 270 Bl All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 271 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces 272 El RCCCICIQUOM 6 4 43 48 4 455225438 as eS 272 AACO se a Sead d apne ad RS dS 2 9 Bl Driving Through Water 273 O Flowing Rising Water lesen 274 O Shallow Standing Water 274 W Power Steering
353. t trailer towing AII Wheel Drive AWD Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O C C C O L C L L a a Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid AII Wheel Drive AWD Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler
354. tandards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 EXAMPLE 15 Rim diameter in inches in 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the
355. te the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you
356. te conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Rear Wheel Drive RWD All Wheel Drive AWD Displays Base Cluster On vehicles equipped with a Base Instrument Cluster the odometer will display 2drivE when the vehicle is in Rear Wheel Drive RWD and 4drivE when All Wheel Drive AWD is activated If the odometer displays the tCASE warning message after engine start up or during driving the AWD system is not functioning properly and service is required NOTE Vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display SERVICE AWD SYS TEM if the system is not functioning properly and service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC for further information gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A l
357. tempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vm button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call t
358. the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Headlights On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the norma
359. the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN RED REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e Ifthe radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the gl
360. the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES any procedure yourself The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which WARNING may require servicing or replacement in the future You can be badly injured working on or around a CAUTION motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per you have any doubt about your ability to perform a form repairs and service when necessary could service
361. the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your celluar phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing ee UNDE
362. the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 NOTE WARNING e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in Improper installation of a child restraint to the the strap LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the sea
363. this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 125 48 44 1 32 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 Layer 3 Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Aud
364. tion Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 2 The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Engine Compartment 2 7L 367 W Maintenance Procedures Bl Engine Compartment 3 5L 368 HL Engme Oik sp nae riss Bl Engine Compartment 5 7L 369 O Engine Oil Filter lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 370 D Engine Air Cleaner Filter O Loose Fuel Filler Cap 00000 370 H Maintenance Free Battery ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance H Air Conditioner Maintenance Proc rt 3 1 O A C Air Filter W Replacement Parts l l 372 O Body Lubrication W Dealer Serie ees psen kpaa eh ew oe UR 372 0 Windshield Wiper Blades 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M O Adding Washer Fluid 4964546265 eeuees 384 OQExhavst SySlEDi sae ieper eo vas ee HUS 385 ACooling Systemi lt 44 0 h0be4 gene so boas 388 ELDESKO DUBIO uo oo oe ee SIS a vp ne es 393 D Automatic Transmission 395 o All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 397 D Appearance Care And Protection From C OTTOS ON 2 2 2359 9 dee RERO eee ea 398 inc a a a a a ee ea re 403 O Integrated Power Module 403 O Rear Power Distribution Center 406 W Vehicle Storage 000 411 W Repl
365. tion lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on 031307267 Lane Change Assist Multifunction Lever Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond Turn Signals the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows three times then automatically turn off on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever i
366. tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for high pits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd_week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflati
367. to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the Uconnect lan guage selection Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur
368. to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove extender should be used only if the existing belt is not compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on long enough When it is not required remove the ex the airbag covers tender and store it WARNINCG Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags 81cb24f3 This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag Front Airbag Components Airbags 2 Knee Bolsters NOTE These air
369. trol The system will Air Temperature Control Air Recirculation Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to either Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User selectable to any speed Automatic Automatic Automatic User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can bc overridden for 10 minutes at a time Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes al a lime User selectable outside or recirculated Automatic Automatic User selectable A C on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off 81341de7 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The operator can override the AUT
370. uick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recover
371. uminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equiva lent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Interior Trim should be
372. up Confirmation T Towing Confirmation Say 4 digit System Lists pin code Phones Select phone to be deleted Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing New phone Select a language will English Espanol temporarily or Francais Prompts on off override phone priorities List Phones System System Lists Phone Deleted confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 oice Commands Primar Alternate s X three O tw fj eight nine star e O C G continue delete dial download edit home p 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primar Primar language return to main menu select phone send MEE set up phone settings or phone list names list phones mobile mute off towing assistance new entr transfer call Uconnect Tutorial try again OO n pager pair a phone voice training ohone pairing pairing work ohonebook ohone book yes previous record again o redial ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli
373. ur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink buttons and power sunroof switch may also be included if equipped eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transm
374. ur vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 276 STARTING AND OPERATINC M POWER STEERING system This noise should be considered normal and it The standard power steering system will give you good does not in any way damage the steering system vehicle response and in
375. urting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the PIRE RE vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision Continued E Ps A LI 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
376. use the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 334 STARTING AND OPERATING EM NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional CALON factory installed options or dealer installed options must e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for axle or other parts could be damaged the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a for your vehicle trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended ee STARTING AND
377. utomated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible t
378. utton causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP
379. vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 26 Door Ajar Indicator CAUTION Aa This light will turn on to indicate that one or more door may be ajar 27 Decklid Ajar Indicator cS This light will turn on to indicate that the decklid may be ajar Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 28 Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator S This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful EVIC IF EQUIPPED information by pressing the switches mounted on the The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster e System status e Vehicle information warning message displays
380. ver 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 0 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler
381. ver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scal
382. vigation system 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 2 Touch the scree
383. windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the pas
384. wn or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key button will operate removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym housed cuberelosssdiom bol will display until the trunk is closed outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK SAFETY WARNING TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter WARNING twice within five seconds Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or 81ac2fd7 through the inside of the vehicle Always close the Trunk Release trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in Button the trunk young children may not be able to escape l mE E u even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped With the 3enibon switchi in the RUN position the Trunk dba drank children can die from suffocation or
385. xceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ee of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control the
386. ximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during mountain driving trailer towing and other situations ERS Operation When the shift lever is in the Drive position the trans mission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears Moving the shift lever to the left D will activate ERS downshift the transmission and dis play the top available gear in the instrument cluster Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left D or right D will change the top available gear The trans mission will not shift above the indicated gear but will shift up and down normally automatically through the lower gears Holding the shift lever to the left D will shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible with out overspeeding the engine for maximum engine brak ing Holding the shift lever to the right D for a few seconds will disengage ERS mode AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many oth
387. y Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm the System Remove the key
388. y bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 5076 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency 394 MAINTAIN
389. y plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CUPHOLDERS Rear Seat Cupholders Front Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest P between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the forward in the armrest and side by side to provide center console convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows Front Seat Cupholders Rear Seat Cupholders eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 STORAGE Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest im dod OGURA 1 Release button for bottom compartment 2 Release button for top compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment You can access this compartment directly without first exposing the upper compartment by oper ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M
390. ypes one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD a If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature pl
391. ystem provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 TES Cn eae A LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufactur

Dodge 2008 Ram Chassis Cab 3500 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents